blob: e45ff81951c5c454589f6d138a7d7a07d5f0ff35 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar2e693a82019-10-16 22:35:02 +02001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.1. Last change: 2019 Oct 04
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar2e693a82019-10-16 22:35:02 +020063are in the "/usr/vim/vim81/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim81". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings. This
70allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
82NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
83The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
84file for your system. Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is
85automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
220To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must
221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
479 *g:html_number_lines*
480Default: current 'number' setting.
481When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
482When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
483highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
484Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
485 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
486Force to omit the line numbers: >
487 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
488Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
489 :unlet g:html_number_lines
490<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200491 *g:html_line_ids*
492Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
493When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
494inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
495takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
496pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
497view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200498(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200499javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
500For example: >
501
502 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
503 page.html#123 does the same
504
505 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
506 diff.html#42 does the same
507<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200508 *g:html_use_css*
509Default: 1.
510When 1, generate valid HTML 4.01 markup with CSS1 styling, supported in all
511modern browsers and most old browsers.
512When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
513recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
514forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
515Example: >
516 :let g:html_use_css = 0
517<
518 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
519Default: 0.
520When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
521from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
522value of 'conceallevel'.
523When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
524|conceal|ed.
525
526Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
527included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
528 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
529 :setl conceallevel=0
530<
531 *g:html_ignore_folding*
532Default: 0.
533When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
534Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
535the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
536When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
537text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
538
539Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
540in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
541 zR
542 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
543<
544 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
545Default: 0.
546When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
547When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
548in Vim.
549
550Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
551regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
552
553This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
554>
555 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
556<
557 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
558Default: 0.
559When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
560Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
561open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
562'foldcolumn' setting.
563When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
564folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
565>
566 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
567<
568 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
569Default: empty string.
570This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
571when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
572for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
573line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
574affected in this way as follows:
575 f: fold column
576 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
577 t: fold text
578 d: diff filler
579
580Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
581 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
582<
583This feature is currently implemented by inserting read-only <input> elements
584into the markup to contain the uncopyable areas. This does not work well in
585all cases. When pasting to some applications which understand HTML, the
586<input> elements also get pasted. But plain-text paste destinations should
587always work.
588
589 *g:html_no_invalid*
590Default: 0.
591When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, an invalid attribute is
592intentionally inserted into the <input> element for the uncopyable areas. This
593increases the number of applications you can paste to without also pasting the
594<input> elements. Specifically, Microsoft Word will not paste the <input>
595elements if they contain this invalid attribute.
596When 1, no invalid markup is ever intentionally inserted, and the generated
597page should validate. However, be careful pasting into Microsoft Word when
598|g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty; it can be hard to get rid of the <input>
599elements which get pasted.
600
601 *g:html_hover_unfold*
602Default: 0.
603When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
604|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
605When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
606cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
607disabled javascript to view the folded text.
608
609Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
610feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
611normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
612they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
613>
614 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
615<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200616 *g:html_id_expr*
617Default: ""
618Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
619to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
620longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
621evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
622so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
623larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
624
625 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
626<
627To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
628
629 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
630<
631Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
632evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
633windows.
634
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200635 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
636Default: current 'wrap' setting.
637When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
638not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
639When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
640used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
641window.
642Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
643 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
644Explicitly disable wrapping: >
645 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
646Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
647 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
648<
649 *g:html_no_pre*
650Default: 0.
651When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
652tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
653characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
654When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
655used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
656references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
657text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
658old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
659the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
660>
661 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
662<
663 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100664Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
665 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
666 1 otherwise.
667When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200668number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100669When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200670are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
671allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
672the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
673indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
674
675Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
676 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
677<
678Force tabs to be expanded: >
679 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
680<
681 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
682It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
683|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
684
685If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
686for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
687'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
688set to match the chosen document encoding.
689
690Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
691|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
692wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
693encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
694below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
695
696Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
697the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
698
699 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
700 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
701
702 *g:html_use_encoding*
703Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
704To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
705name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
706something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
707webserver: >
708 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
709You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
710entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
711 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
712To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
713variable: >
714 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
715<
716 *g:html_encoding_override*
717Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
718 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
719This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
720specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
721list of conversions.
722
723This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
724pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
725
726Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
727 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
728<
729 *g:html_charset_override*
730Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
731 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
732 browser support.
733This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
734'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
735use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
736TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
737and UTF-32 instead, use: >
738 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
739
740Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
741compatibility problems with some major browsers.
742
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200743 *g:html_font*
744Default: "monospace"
745You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
746g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
747surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
748item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
749way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
750result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
751Examples: >
752
753 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
754 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
755
756 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
757 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
758<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200759 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
760Default: 0.
761When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
762When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
763>
764 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
765<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100766==============================================================================
7675. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
768
769 *b:current_syntax-variable*
770Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
771"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
772settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
773 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
774 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
775 :au BufReadPost * endif
776
777
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000778
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000779ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000780
781ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
782any value to the respective variable. Example: >
783 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
784To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
785 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
786
787Variable Highlight ~
788abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
789abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
790
791
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000792ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000793
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000794See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000795
796
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000797ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000798
799The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000800by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000801by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000802and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000803
804 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
805
806will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
807
808 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
809 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
810 ]]></script>
811
812See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
813
814
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000815APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000816
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100817The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
818version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000819
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000820
821 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000822ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
823 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000824
825Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
826doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
827startup vimrc: >
828 :let filetype_i = "asm"
829Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
830
831There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
832extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
833line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
834files are included:
835 asm GNU assembly (the default)
836 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
837 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
838 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
839 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
840 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
841 nasm Netwide assembly
842 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
843 MMX)
844 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
845
846The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100847 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000848Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100849one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200850immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
851equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
852between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
853particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
854highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000855
856The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
857b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000858 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000859
860If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
861the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
862language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000863 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000864
865As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
866
867
868Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
869
870To enable a feature: >
871 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
872To disable a feature: >
873 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
874
875Variable Highlight ~
876nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
877 (parser dependent; not recommended)
878nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
879nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
880
881
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000882ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000883
884*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
885hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
886using. For Perl script use: >
887 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
888 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
889For Visual Basic use: >
890 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
891 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
892
893
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000894BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000895
896The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN
897for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
898are supported.
899
900Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
901in ones |.vimrc|: >
902 let baan_code_stds=1
903
904*baan-folding*
905
906Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
907mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
908source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
909
910To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
911 let baan_fold=1
912Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
913indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
914considered equal to a tab). >
915 let baan_fold_block=1
916Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000917SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000918match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
919 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000920Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000921the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
922.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
923 set foldminlines=5
924 set foldnestmax=6
925
926
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000927BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000928
929Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
930which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
931five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
932otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
933Basic.
934
935
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000936C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000937
938A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
939to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000940 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000941To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
942 :unlet c_comment_strings
943
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100944An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
945 :set filetype=cpp
946
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000947Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200948*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
949*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
950*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
951*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
952*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
953*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
954*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000955 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200956 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
957 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200958*c_curly_error* highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000959 start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200960*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
961*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
962*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
963*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
964*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200965 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200966*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
967*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
968*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
969*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
970*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000971
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000972When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
973become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
974 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +0000975"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
976 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000977
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000978If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
979when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
980to a larger number: >
981 :let c_minlines = 100
982This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
983displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
984disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
985
986When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
987works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
988you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
989
990To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
991Example: >
992 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
993 :function MyCadd()
994 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
995 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
996 : hi link cMyItem Title
997 :endfun
998
999ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1000"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1001not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1002highlighting: >
1003 :hi link cConstant NONE
1004
1005If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1006highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1007
1008If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001009in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001011 syn sync fromstart
1012 set foldmethod=syntax
1013
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001014CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001015
1016C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1017the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1018
1019By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1020of C or C++: >
1021 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1022
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001023
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001024CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001025
1026Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1027that are available. Additionally there is:
1028
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001029chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1030chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1031chill_minlines like c_minlines
1032
1033
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001034CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001035
1036ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1037If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1038 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1039This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1040"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1041file).
1042
1043You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1044 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1045Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1046 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1047This works immediately.
1048
1049
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001050CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1051
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001052The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1053*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1054value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1055identifiers:
1056>
1057 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1058 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1059 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1060 \ }
1061<
1062Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1063
1064If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1065language constants and special forms are matched.
1066
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001067Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1068Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1069using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1070
1071Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1072bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1073
1074This option is off by default.
1075>
1076 " Default
1077 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1078<
1079
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001080COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001081
1082COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1083development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1084versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1085add this line to your .vimrc: >
1086 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1087To disable it again, use this: >
1088 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1089
1090
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001091COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001092
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001093The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001094comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1095
1096 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1097
1098The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1099
1100
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001101CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1102
1103Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
1104
1105Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001106cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001107cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001108
1109
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001110CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001111
1112This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1113used.
1114
1115Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1116symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1117between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001118"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1119>
1120 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121
1122For using tcsh: >
1123
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001124 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001125
1126Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1127tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001128will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001129"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1130variable.
1131
1132
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001133CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001134
1135Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001136hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001137or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001138normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001139line to your .vimrc file: >
1140
1141 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1142
1143Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1144
1145 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1146
1147To disable these again, use this: >
1148
1149 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1150 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1151<
1152
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001153CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001154
1155Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1156doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1157startup vimrc: >
1158 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1159
1160
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001161DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1162
1163Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1164used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1165a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1166from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1167
1168More information about the language and its development environment at the
1169official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1170
1171dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1172type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1173and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1174framework.
1175
1176Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1177
1178https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1179
1180
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001181DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001182
1183Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001184according to freedesktop.org standard:
1185http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001186But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001187highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001188to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: >
1189 :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1
1190
1191
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001192DIFF *diff.vim*
1193
1194The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1195there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1196
1197 :let diff_translations = 0
1198
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001199Also see |diff-slow|.
1200
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001201
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001202DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001203
1204The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1205provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1206the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1207versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1208uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1209line to your startup file: >
1210 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1211
1212
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001213DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001214DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1215DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001216
1217There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1218are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1219automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1220defaults to XML.
1221You can set the type manually: >
1222 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1223or: >
1224 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1225You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1226Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1227 :set filetype=docbksgml
1228or: >
1229 :set filetype=docbkxml
1230
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001231You can specify the DocBook version: >
1232 :let docbk_ver = 3
1233When not set 4 is used.
1234
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001235
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001236DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001237
1238There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1239extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1240is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1241this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1242Select the version you want with the following line: >
1243
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001244 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001245
1246If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1247Windows 2000.
1248
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001249A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001250"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1251is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001252
1253 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1254
1255If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1256
1257
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001258DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1259
1260Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001261(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1262idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001263
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001264There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1265explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1266Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001267 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1268or >
1269 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1270
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001271It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1272the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1273adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001274 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1275
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001276There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001277are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1278
1279Variable Default Effect ~
1280g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1281g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1282 doxygen comments.
1283
1284doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1285 and html_my_rendering underline.
1286
1287doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1288 colour highlighting.
1289
1290doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001291 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001292
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001293There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001294configuration.
1295
1296Highlight Effect ~
1297doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1298 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1299doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1300 \endlink from a \link section.
1301
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001302
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001303DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001304
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001305The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001306case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1307
1308 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1309
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001310The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001311this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1312
1313 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1314
1315before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1316Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1317'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1318Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1319highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001320delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001321
1322 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1323
1324The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1325
1326
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001327EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001328
1329While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001330syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1331highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001332highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1333
1334 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1335
1336Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1337
1338Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1339
1340 :let eiffel_strict=1
1341 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1342
1343Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1344five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1345"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1346
1347Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1348guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1349lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1350
1351If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1352"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1353
1354 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1355
1356instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1357
1358Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1359experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1360
1361 :let eiffel_ise=1
1362
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001363Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001364
1365 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1366
1367to your startup file.
1368
1369
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001370EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1371
1372Two syntax highlighting files exists for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
1373version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
1374Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1375
1376Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1377for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
1378(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1379
1380The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1381
1382 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1383 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1384
1385To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
1386auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1387add the following line to your startup file: >
1388
1389 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"
1390
1391 or
1392
1393 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"
1394
1395
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001396ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001397
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001398Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001399the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001400
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001401The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1402put the following line in your vimrc: >
1403
1404 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1405
1406To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1407
1408 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001409
1410
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001411FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1412
1413FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001414NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1415development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001416
1417Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1418syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1419editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1420start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1421'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1422(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1423and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1424
1425If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1426move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1427 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1428
1429
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001430FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001431
1432The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1433modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001434following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001435J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1436
1437If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1438redefine the following syntax groups:
1439
1440 - formConditional
1441 - formNumber
1442 - formStatement
1443 - formHeaderStatement
1444 - formComment
1445 - formPreProc
1446 - formDirective
1447 - formType
1448 - formString
1449
1450Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1451directives per default in the same syntax group.
1452
1453A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001454header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001455this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1456
1457 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1458
1459The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001460gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001461conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1462
1463
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001464FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001465
1466Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001467Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001468should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1469almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001470
1471Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001472Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001473syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1474
1475When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001476form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001477 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001478in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001479form, then >
1480 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1481in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1482
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001483If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1484extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1485file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1486will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1487on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001488
1489When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1490source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001491fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001492neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001493determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1494using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1495compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1496free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1497columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1498are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1499algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1500file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1501incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1502just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001503of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001504
1505Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001506Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001507fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001508Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1509using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001510variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1511 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001512placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001513mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1514
1515Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1516If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1517fortran_fold with a command such as >
1518 :let fortran_fold=1
1519to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1520is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001521subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001522also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1523 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1524then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001525case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001526fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1527 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1528then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001529lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001530
1531If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1532fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001533you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001534units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1535unit.
1536
1537More precise fortran syntax ~
1538If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1539 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001540then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001541statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1542recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1543construct.
1544
1545Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001546The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1547find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1548deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1549items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001550
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001551If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1552other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001553that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001554
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001555The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1556the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1557to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1558fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1559ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001560
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001561If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1562set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1563ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1564an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1565contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001566 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1567 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001568 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001569 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001570 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001571 endif
1572Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1573precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1574
1575Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001576the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1577by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1578f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1579files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1580identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1581Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001582 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001583
1584For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1585now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1586silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001587instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001588
1589The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1590comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1591non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1592or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001593items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001594
1595Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001596Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1597strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001598because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1599
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001600For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1601|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001602
1603
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001604FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001605
1606In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1607the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1608appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1609patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1610number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1611
1612For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1613as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1614
1615 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1616 \ set filetype=fvwm
1617
1618If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1619find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1620"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1621in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1622
1623 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1624
1625to your .vimrc file.
1626
1627
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001628GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001629
1630The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1631the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1632is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1633are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1634
1635 htmlString
1636 htmlValue
1637 htmlEndTag
1638 htmlTag
1639 htmlTagN
1640
1641Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1642java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1643group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1644correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1645to the contains clause.
1646
1647The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1648group to make them easier to see.
1649
1650
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001651GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001652
1653The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001654under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001655of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1656filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1657(see |filetype.txt|).
1658
1659
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001660HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001661
1662The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001663Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001664syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1665
1666If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1667light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1668 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1669To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1670add: >
1671 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1672To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1673 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1674And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1675 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1676If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1677your .vimrc: >
1678 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1679
1680The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1681directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001682directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1683operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001684as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1685 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1686
1687The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1688automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1689TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001690or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001691in your .vimrc >
1692 :let lhs_markup = none
1693for no highlighting at all, or >
1694 :let lhs_markup = tex
1695to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1696For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1697this variable, so e.g. >
1698 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001699will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001700set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1701loading a file.
1702
1703
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001704HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001705
1706The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1707
1708The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1709This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
1710closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
1711defined for you)
1712
1713Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1714names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1715makes it easy to spot errors
1716
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001717Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001718names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1719
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001720Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001721are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1722text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1723while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001724only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001725<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001726
1727If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1728following syntax groups:
1729
1730 - htmlBold
1731 - htmlBoldUnderline
1732 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1733 - htmlUnderline
1734 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1735 - htmlItalic
1736 - htmlTitle for titles
1737 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1738
1739To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1740of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1741following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1742are read during initialization) >
1743 :let html_my_rendering=1
1744
1745If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1746http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1747
1748You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1749vimrc file: >
1750 :let html_no_rendering=1
1751
1752HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1753details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1754However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001755ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001756 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1757
1758JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1759'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001760programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001761supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1762
1763Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1764
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001765There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1766written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001767following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1768(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001769>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001770 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1771 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1772
1773Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1774the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1775
1776
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001777HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001778
1779The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1780
1781Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1782doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1783this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1784different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1785 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1786
1787Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1788
1789Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1790signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1791a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1792 :set syntax=htmlos
1793
1794Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1795block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1796
1797
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001798IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001799
1800Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1801how to recognize this filetype.
1802
1803To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1804 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1805
1806
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001807INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001808
1809Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1810most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1811to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1812 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1813
1814By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1815and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1816you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1817need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1818 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1819
1820This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1821set of highlighted system functions.
1822
1823The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1824it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1825by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1826startup sequence: >
1827 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1828
1829By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1830version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1831Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1832startup sequence: >
1833 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1834
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001835IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1836
1837IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1838Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1839
1840IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1841rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001842repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001843
1844There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1845are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1846
1847The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1848
1849Variable Effect ~
1850
1851idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1852 extensions
1853idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1854idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1855 quite helpful)
1856idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1857
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001858
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001859JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001860
1861The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1862
1863In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1864flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001865classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001866way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1867 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1868
1869All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1870highlight them use: >
1871 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1872
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001873You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001874download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1875If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1876use the following: >
1877 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1878Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1879
1880Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001881how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001882functions:
1883
1884If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1885a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1886 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1887However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1888supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1889 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1890If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1891declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1892definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1893original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1894
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001895In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001896only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001897statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001898your startup file: >
1899 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1900The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001901characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001902new highlightings for the following groups.:
1903 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1904which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001905strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001906have opted to chose another background for those statements.
1907
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001908Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1909creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1910similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1911and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001912 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1913 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1914 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1915 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1916 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001917 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001918 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1919To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1920 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1921
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001922If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1923can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1924scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1925actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1926CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001927 :let java_javascript=1
1928 :let java_css=1
1929 :let java_vb=1
1930
1931In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1932for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1933 :hi link javaParen Comment
1934or >
1935 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1936
1937If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1938when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1939to a larger number: >
1940 :let java_minlines = 50
1941This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
1942displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
1943number is that redrawing can become slow.
1944
1945
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02001946JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
1947
1948The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
1949default. To disable concealment: >
1950 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
1951
1952To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
1953 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
1954
1955
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001956LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001957
1958Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
1959style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
1960define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
1961 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
1962
1963
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001964LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001965
1966Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
1967gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
1968 :syn sync minlines=300
1969may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
1970difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
1971
1972
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02001973LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
1974
1975To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
1976
1977 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
1978<
1979
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00001980LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
1981
1982The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
1983
1984 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
1985 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
1986 Useful for AutoLisp.
1987 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
1988 of parenthesization will receive different
1989 highlighting.
1990<
1991The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
1992the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
1993colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
1994specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02001995usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00001996highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
1997
1998
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001999LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002000
2001There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2002
2003If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2004
2005 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2006
2007For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2008set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2009
2010 :let lite_minlines = 200
2011
2012
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002013LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002014
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002015LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002016file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2017users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2018should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2019
2020 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2021
2022If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2023modeline. For a LPC file:
2024
2025 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2026
2027For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2028
2029 // vim:set ft=c:
2030
2031If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2032
2033There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002034used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002035and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002036assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002037you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2038
2039 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2040
2041For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2042
2043 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2044
2045For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2046
2047 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2048
2049For uLPC series of LPC:
2050uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2051instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2052
2053
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002054LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002055
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002056The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002057the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2058lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010020595.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002060
2061 :let lua_version = 5
2062 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002063
2064
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002065MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002066
2067Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002068quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002069signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2070whitespaces and end with a newline.
2071
2072Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002073as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002074only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2075
2076By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002077displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002078with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2079
2080 :let mail_minlines = 30
2081
2082
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002083MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002084
2085In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2086errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2087feature off by using: >
2088
2089 :let make_no_commands = 1
2090
2091
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002092MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002093
2094Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2095supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2096The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2097highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2098
2099 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2100
2101to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2102choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21031, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2104$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2105
2106 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2107 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2108 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2109 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2110 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2111 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2112 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2113 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2114 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2115
2116
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002117MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002118
2119Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2120have the following in your .vimrc: >
2121
2122 let filetype_m = "mma"
2123
2124
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002125MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002126
2127If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2128highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2129comments: >
2130
2131 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2132
2133To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2134
2135 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2136
2137To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2138'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2139
2140 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2141
2142Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2143
2144 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2145
2146To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2147
2148 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2149
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002150Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002151use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2152To enable this option: >
2153
2154 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2155
2156An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2157
2158 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2159
2160
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002161MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002162
2163There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2164
2165If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2166
2167 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2168
2169For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2170set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2171
2172 :let msql_minlines = 200
2173
2174
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002175N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2176
2177N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2178Couchbase Server databases.
2179
2180Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2181and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2182many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2183
2184
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002185NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002186
2187There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2188
2189If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2190errors, use this: >
2191
2192 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2193
2194If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2195
2196
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002197NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002198
2199The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2200activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2201can use them.
2202
2203For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002204processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002205features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: >
2206
2207 :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1
2208
2209Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2210Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2211there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002212you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002213can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2214native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2215\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2216accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2217environments.
2218
2219In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2220follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2221
22221. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2223
22242. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2225 exclamation mark, etc.
2226
22273. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2228 carriage return.
2229
2230The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2231algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2232
2233Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2234furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2235vertical space input will be output as is.
2236
2237Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2238than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2239practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002240marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002241need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002242spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2243
2244 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2245
2246Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2247with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2248highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002249"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002250
2251 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2252 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2253 \ gui=reverse,bold
2254
2255If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2256with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2257file: >
2258
2259 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2260
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002261As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002262paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2263
2264Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2265groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2266
2267
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002268OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002269
2270The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2271.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2272
2273 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2274
2275you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2276by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2277
2278 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2279
2280prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2281contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2282
2283
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002284PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002285
2286The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml
2287and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002288as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2289sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002290you set the variable: >
2291
2292 :let papp_include_html=1
2293
2294in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2295sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002296edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002297
2298The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2299http://papp.plan9.de.
2300
2301
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002302PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002303
2304Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection
2305doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
2306startup vimrc: >
2307
2308 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2309
2310The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2311provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002312Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002313enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2314following line to your startup file: >
2315
2316 :let pascal_traditional=1
2317
2318To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2319keywords, etc): >
2320
2321 :let pascal_delphi=1
2322
2323
2324The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2325*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2326operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2327
2328 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2329
2330Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2331
2332 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2333
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002334Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002335pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2336match Turbo Pascal. >
2337
2338 :let pascal_gpc=1
2339
2340or >
2341
2342 :let pascal_fpc=1
2343
2344To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2345pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2346
2347 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2348
2349If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2350will be highlighted as Error. >
2351
2352 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2353
2354
2355
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002356PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002357
2358There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2359
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002360Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2361to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2362files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002363
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002364 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002365
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002366To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002367off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002368
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002369To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2370from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002371
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002372 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002373
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002374(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2375enabled it.)
2376
2377If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2378
2379 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2380
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002381(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002382
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002383The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2384highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002385perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2386
2387 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2388 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2389 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2390
2391(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2392
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002393The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002394synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2395If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002396then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002397out the line that causes the mistake.
2398
2399One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2400
2401 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2402 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2403
2404Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2405its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2406
2407 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2408
2409If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2410
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002411 :let perl_fold = 1
2412
2413If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2414
2415 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002416
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002417Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2418this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002419
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002420 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002421
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002422Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2423via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002424
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002425 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2426
2427Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2428behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2429
2430 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002431
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002432PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002433
2434[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2435it has been renamed to "php"]
2436
2437There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2438
2439If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2440
2441 let php_sql_query = 1
2442
2443For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2444
2445 let php_baselib = 1
2446
2447Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2448
2449 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2450
2451Using the old colorstyle: >
2452
2453 let php_oldStyle = 1
2454
2455Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2456
2457 let php_asp_tags = 1
2458
2459Disable short tags: >
2460
2461 let php_noShortTags = 1
2462
2463For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2464
2465 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2466
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002467For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002468one: >
2469
2470 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2471
2472Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2473
2474 let php_folding = 1
2475
2476Selecting syncing method: >
2477
2478 let php_sync_method = x
2479
2480x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2481x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2482x = 0 to sync from start.
2483
2484
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002485PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2486
2487TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2488variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002489see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002490
2491This syntax file has the option >
2492
2493 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2494
2495if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2496
2497
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002498PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002499
2500PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2501
2502This syntax file has the options:
2503
2504- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002505 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002506
2507 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002508 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002509
2510 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2511 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2512 continuation symbols
2513
2514 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2515
2516- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2517 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2518
2519
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002520PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002521
2522There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2523
2524If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2525
2526 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2527
2528For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2529set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2530
2531 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2532
2533
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002534POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002535
2536There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2537
2538First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2539currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2540and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2541Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2542extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2543level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2544highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2545
2546 :let postscr_level=2
2547
2548If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2549the most prevalent version currently.
2550
2551Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2552particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2553PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2554
2555If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2556Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2557follows: >
2558
2559 :let postscr_display=1
2560
2561If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2562Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2563postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2564
2565 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2566
2567PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2568useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2569cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2570character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2571explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2572highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2573
2574 :let postscr_fonts=1
2575 :let postscr_encodings=1
2576
2577There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2578PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2579operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2580if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2581operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2582or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2583highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2584postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2585
2586 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2587<
2588
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002589 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2590PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002591
2592This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2593
2594In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2595the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2596appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2597patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2598"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2599
2600For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2601files, add the following: >
2602
2603 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2604 \ set filetype=ptcap
2605
2606If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2607are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2608internal variable to a larger number: >
2609
2610 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2611
2612(The default is 20 lines.)
2613
2614
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002615PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002616
2617Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2618doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2619startup vimrc: >
2620 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2621The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2622Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2623 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2624 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2625
2626
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002627PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002628
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002629There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002630
2631For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002632 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002633
2634For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002635 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002636
2637For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002638 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2639
2640For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2641 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2642or >
2643 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2644(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002645
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002646For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002647 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002648
2649If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002650preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2652
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002653Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002654 1 above with anything.
2655
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002656QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002657
2658The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002659Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002660a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the
2661syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002662users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002663can be set for the following effects:
2664
2665set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2666 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2667
2668set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2669 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2670
2671set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2672 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2673
2674Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2675commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2676
2677
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002678R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2679
2680The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2681can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2682 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2683
2684You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2685 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2686
2687enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2688braces: >
2689 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2690
2691and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2692 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2693
2694
2695R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2696
2697To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2698 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2699
2700To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2701 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2702
2703To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2704 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2705
2706By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2707language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2708you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2709`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2710you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2711 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2712
2713
2714R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2715
2716To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2717 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2718
2719
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002720READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002721
2722The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002723few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002724items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2725command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2726 let readline_has_bash = 1
2727
2728This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2729later, and part earlier) adds.
2730
2731
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002732RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2733
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002734Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2735select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2736syntax list.
2737
2738To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002739 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002740
2741To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2742`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2743 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
2744 \ 'cpp' = ['cpp', 'c++'],
2745 \ 'bash' = ['bash', 'sh'],
2746 ...
2747 }
2748
2749To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2750 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2751
2752To enable folding of sections: >
2753 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2754
2755Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2756
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002757
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002758REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002759
2760If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2761when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2762to a larger number: >
2763 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2764This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2765displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2766number is that redrawing can become slow.
2767
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002768Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2769comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2770your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2771>
2772 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2773
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002774
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002775RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002776
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002777 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2778 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2779 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2780 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2781 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2782
2783 *ruby_operators*
2784 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2785
2786Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2787
2788 :let ruby_operators = 1
2789<
2790 *ruby_space_errors*
2791 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2792
2793Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2794
2795 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2796<
2797This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2798as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2799"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2800spaces respectively.
2801
2802 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2803 Ruby: Folding ~
2804
2805Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2806
2807 :let ruby_fold = 1
2808<
2809This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2810buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2811filetypes.
2812
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002813Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2814"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2815
2816You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2817
2818 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2819<
2820The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2821
2822 keyword meaning ~
2823 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2824 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2825 NONE Nothing
2826 if "if" or "unless" block
2827 def "def" block
2828 class "class" block
2829 module "module" block
2830 do "do" block
2831 begin "begin" block
2832 case "case" block
2833 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2834 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2835 [ Array literal
2836 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2837 / Regexp
2838 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2839 : Symbol
2840 # Multiline comment
2841 << Here documents
2842 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2843
2844 *ruby_no_expensive*
2845 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002846
2847By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002848of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002849experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2850you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002851
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002852 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002853<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002854In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2855
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002856 *ruby_minlines*
2857
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002858If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2859scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2860the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002861
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002862 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002863<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002864Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2865largest class or module.
2866
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002867 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2868 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002869
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002870Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2871"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002872
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002873 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002874<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002875
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002876SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002877
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002878By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002879
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002880scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2881Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002882
2883
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002884SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002885
2886The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2887of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2888
2889The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2890case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002891used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002892highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2893 :let sdl_2000=1
2894
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002895This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002896keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2897 :let SDL_no_96=1
2898
2899
2900The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2901satisfied with it for my own projects.
2902
2903
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002904SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002905
2906To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2907highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2908
2909 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2910
2911in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2912inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2913by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2914also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2915you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2916
2917Bugs:
2918
2919 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2920 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2921 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2922 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2923 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2924 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2925
2926
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002927SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002928
2929The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2930
2931The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2932This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
2933closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
2934defined for you)
2935
2936Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
2937names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
2938
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002939Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002940names are colored differently than unknown ones.
2941
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002942Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002943are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
2944text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
2945<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
2946
2947If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
2948following syntax groups:
2949
2950 - sgmlBold
2951 - sgmlBoldItalic
2952 - sgmlUnderline
2953 - sgmlItalic
2954 - sgmlLink for links
2955
2956To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
2957following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
2958are read during initialization) >
2959 let sgml_my_rendering=1
2960
2961You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
2962vimrc file: >
2963 let sgml_no_rendering=1
2964
2965(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
2966
2967
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002968 *ft-posix-synax* *ft-dash-syntax*
2969SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002970
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002971This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
2972shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002973
2974Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02002975various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002976
2977 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
2978 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
2979<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02002980See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
2981cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
2982/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
2983that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
2984shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
2985symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002986
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002987One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002988variables in your <.vimrc>:
2989
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002990 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002991 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002992< posix: (using this is the nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002993 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002994< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002995 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00002996< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002997 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002998
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002999< (dash users should use posix)
3000
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003001If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3002default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003003the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3004statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003005sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003006
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003007The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3008
3009 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3010 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3011 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3012 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003013>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003014then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003015syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3016to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003017
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003018 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3019
3020If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3021when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003022to a larger number. Example: >
3023
3024 let sh_minlines = 500
3025
3026This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3027displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3028number is that redrawing can become slow.
3029
3030If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3031reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3032
3033 let sh_maxlines = 100
3034<
3035The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3036speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3037
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003038syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3039extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3040for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3041the following line in your .vimrc: >
3042
3043 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3044<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003045
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003046 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3047 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003048
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003049You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3050Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3051file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3052
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003053 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003054 " ==============
3055 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3056 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3057 unlet b:current_syntax
3058 endif
3059 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3060 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3061 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3062 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3063 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3064<
3065This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3066 awk '...awk code here...'
3067be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3068extended to other languages.
3069
3070
3071SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3072(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003073
3074The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3075
3076- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3077 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3078 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3079
3080- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3081 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003082 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003083 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3084 them in the syntax file.
3085
3086- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3087 highlighting of # style comments.
3088
3089 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3090 number of #s.
3091
3092 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003093 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003094
3095 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3096 more than one #.
3097
3098Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003099PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003100fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3101the syntax file.
3102
3103
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003104SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3105 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003106 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003107
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003108While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3109custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3110SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003111
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003112Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3113scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3114supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3115buffer by buffer basis.
3116
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003117For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003118
3119
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003120TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003121
3122This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3123for how the filetype is detected.
3124
3125Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003126is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003127this line to your .vimrc: >
3128
3129 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3130
3131If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3132when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3133to a larger number: >
3134
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003135 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003136
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003137This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3138displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3139synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3140tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3141redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003142
3143
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003144TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003145
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003146 Tex Contents~
3147 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3148 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3149 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3150 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3151 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3152 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3153 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3154 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3155 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3156 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3157 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3158 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3159 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003160 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003161
3162 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003163 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003164
3165As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3166sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3167 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3168in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3169modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3170 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003171If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003172 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003173<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003174 *g:tex_nospell*
3175 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3176
3177If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3178 let g:tex_nospell=1
3179into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3180comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3181
3182 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003183 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003184
3185Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3186prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3187this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3188 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003189If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3190see |g:tex_nospell|.
3191
3192 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003193 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003194
3195Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3196one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3197want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3198 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003199<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003200 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003201 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003202
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003203The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3204highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3205texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3206terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3207as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003208special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3209 %stopzone
3210which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3211texMathZone.
3212
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003213 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003214 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003215
3216If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3217 :syn sync maxlines=200
3218 :syn sync minlines=50
3219(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003220increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003221if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3222
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003223Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3224|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3225
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003226 *g:tex_fast*
3227
3228Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3229
3230 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3231
3232in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3233highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3234synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3235price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3236folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3237
3238You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3239selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3240
3241 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3242 c : allow texComment syntax
3243 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3244 M : allow texMath syntax
3245 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3246 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3247 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3248 S : allow texStyle syntax
3249 v : allow verbatim syntax
3250 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3251<
3252As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3253but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003254(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003255
3256 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003257 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003258
3259LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3260of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3261package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3262it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3263techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003264by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3265which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3266http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003267
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003268I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3269
3270 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3271<
3272The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3273
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003274 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003275 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003276
3277The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3278although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3279errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3280you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003281 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003282and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003283
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003284 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003285 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003286
3287If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3288code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003289 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3290You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3291(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3292As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3293 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3294You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3295and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3296The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3297has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003298
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003299 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003300 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003301
3302One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3303commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3304following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3305such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3306
3307 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3308 :set ft=tex
3309
3310Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3311always accept such use of @.
3312
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003313 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003314 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003315
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003316If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3317number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3318including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3319superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3320superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3321In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3322
3323One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3324with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003325
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003326 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003327 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3328
3329You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003330<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3331for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003332
3333 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003334 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003335 d = delimiters
3336 m = math symbols
3337 g = Greek
3338 s = superscripts/subscripts
3339<
3340By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3341substitution will not be made.
3342
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003343 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3344 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3345
3346Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3347keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3348syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3349
3350 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3351 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3352 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003353 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003354 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3355 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3356 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003357 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003358
3359 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3360 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3361
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003362 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3363 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3364
3365 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3366
3367 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3368 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3369
3370 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3371 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3372 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3373 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3374
3375 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3376 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3377<
3378 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3379 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3380 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3381< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3382 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3383
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003384
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003385TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003386
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003387There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3388
3389For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3390set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3391
3392 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3393<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003394VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3395 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003396There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003397updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3398g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3399improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003400
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003401 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3402 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3403<
3404 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3405 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003406
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003407 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3408The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3409embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003410
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003411 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3412 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003413 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3414 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3415 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3416 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3417 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003418<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003419By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3420itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3421of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3422and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003423 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003424
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003425Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003426
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003427 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3428 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3429 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003430 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003431 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3432 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3433 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3434 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3435 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003436<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003437 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003438Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3439is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003440highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003441
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003442 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3443<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003444
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003445
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003446XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003447
3448The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3449variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3450You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3451xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3452your .vimrc. Example: >
3453 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3454When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3455
3456Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3457"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3458highlighted.
3459
3460
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003461XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003462
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003463Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003464setting a global variable: >
3465
3466 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3467<
3468 *xml-folding*
3469The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003470start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003471
3472 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3473 :set foldmethod=syntax
3474
3475Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3476especially for large files.
3477
3478
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003479X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003480
3481xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3482XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3483you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3484
3485To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3486somewhere else with "P".
3487
3488Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3489 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003490 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003491 : echo c
3492 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3493 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3494 :endfunction
3495 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3496 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3497This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3498It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3499must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3500
3501It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3502 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3503
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003504
3505YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3506
3507 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
3508A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3509non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3510plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3511and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3512integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
3513will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3514
3515Schema Description ~
3516failsafe No additional highlighting.
3517json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3518core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
3519pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3520 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3521 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
3522 schema.
3523
3524Default schema is `core`.
3525
3526Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3527only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
3528difference defined in the syntax file.
3529
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003530
3531ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3532
3533The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3534
3535 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3536
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003537==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010035386. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003539
3540Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3541
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035421. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003543 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3544 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3545 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3546 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3547 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3548
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035492. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003550 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3551
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035523. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003553 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3554 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3555 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3556
3557Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3558you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3559to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3560and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3561"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3562one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3563This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3564each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3565for a lot of groups.
3566
3567Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3568group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3569for the syntax group with the same name.
3570
3571In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3572defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3573using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3574match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3575keyword with ignoring case.
3576
3577
3578PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3579
3580When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3581
35821. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3583 defined last has priority.
35842. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
35853. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3586 start in later positions.
3587
3588
3589DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3590
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003591:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003592 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3593 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3594 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3595 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3596
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003597:sy[ntax] case
3598 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003599
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003600SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3601
3602:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3603 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3604 in a syntax item:
3605
3606 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3607 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3608 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3609
3610 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3611 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3612 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3613
3614 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3615
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003616:sy[ntax] spell
3617 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3618 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3619
3620
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003621SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3622
3623:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3624 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3625 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3626
3627 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3628 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
3629 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
3630
3631 Example: >
3632 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3633<
3634 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3635 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3636 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3637
3638 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3639
3640 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003641 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003642 match.
3643
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003644 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3645 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003646 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003647
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003648DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3649
3650:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3651
3652 This defines a number of keywords.
3653
3654 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3655 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3656 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3657
3658 Example: >
3659 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3660<
3661 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3662 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3663 These examples do exactly the same: >
3664 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3665 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3666 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003667< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003668 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3669 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3670 variations at once: >
3671 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3672<
3673 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3674 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3675 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3676 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3677 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003678 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003679
3680 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3681 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3682 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3683
3684 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3685 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3686 instead.
3687
3688 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3689
3690 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3691 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3692 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003693 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003694 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3695 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3696< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3697 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3698 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3699
3700
3701DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3702
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003703:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3704 [excludenl]
3705 [keepend]
3706 {pattern}
3707 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003708
3709 This defines one match.
3710
3711 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3712 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3713 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3714 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3715 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003716 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3717 match with the end pattern. See
3718 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003719 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3720 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3721 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3722 line, which makes the match depend on where
3723 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3724 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3725
3726 Example (match a character constant): >
3727 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3728<
3729
3730DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3731 *E398* *E399*
3732:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3733 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3734 [keepend]
3735 [extend]
3736 [excludenl]
3737 start={start_pattern} ..
3738 [skip={skip_pattern}]
3739 end={end_pattern} ..
3740 [{options}]
3741
3742 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3743
3744 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3745 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3746 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3747 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3748 for the text in between the matched start and
3749 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3750 a different group for the start or end match.
3751 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3752 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3753 match with the end pattern. See
3754 |:syn-keepend|.
3755 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003756 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003757 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3758 extend a containing match or item. Only
3759 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3760 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
3761 start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
3762 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3763 skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
3764 the region where not to look for the end
3765 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3766 end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
3767 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3768
3769 Example: >
3770 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3771<
3772 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3773 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3774 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3775 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3776 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3777 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3778
3779 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3780 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3781 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3782 the end patterns.
3783
3784 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3785 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3786 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3787
3788 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3789 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3790 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3791 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3792
3793 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3794 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3795 work: >
3796 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3797 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3798< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3799 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3800 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3801 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3802 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3803< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3804 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3805
3806 *:syn-keepend*
3807 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3808 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3809 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3810 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3811 { starts outer "{}" region
3812 { starts contained "{}" region
3813 } ends contained "{}" region
3814 } ends outer "{} region
3815 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3816 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3817 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3818 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3819 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3820 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3821 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3822< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3823 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3824
3825 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3826 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3827 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3828 contained matches.
3829 *:syn-extend*
3830 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3831 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3832 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3833 extended.
3834 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3835 others don't. Example: >
3836
3837 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3838 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3839 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3840
3841< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3842 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3843 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3844
3845 Another example: >
3846 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3847< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3848 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3849 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3850 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3851 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3852
3853 *:syn-excludenl*
3854 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3855 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3856 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3857 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3858 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3859 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3860 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3861 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3862 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3863 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3864 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3865 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3866 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3867
3868 *:syn-matchgroup*
3869 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3870 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3871 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3872< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3873 between with the "String" group.
3874 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3875 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3876 using a matchgroup.
3877
3878 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3879 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3880 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3881 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3882 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3883
3884 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3885 different colors: >
3886 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3887 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3888 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3889 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3890 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3891 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003892<
3893 *E849*
3894The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003895
3896==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010038977. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003898
3899The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
3900The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
3901and may be mixed with patterns.
3902
3903Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
3904can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02003905 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003906 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
3907:syntax keyword - - - - - -
3908:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
3909:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003910
3911These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003912 conceal
3913 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003914 contained
3915 containedin
3916 nextgroup
3917 transparent
3918 skipwhite
3919 skipnl
3920 skipempty
3921
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003922conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
3923
3924When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02003925Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02003926'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
3927concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
3928edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02003929Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003930
3931concealends *:syn-concealends*
3932
3933When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
3934the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
3935Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
3936'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
3937in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
3938
3939cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003940 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003941The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
3942when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
3943argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003944character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
3945a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003946 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02003947See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003948
3949contained *:syn-contained*
3950
3951When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
3952the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
3953another match. Example: >
3954 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
3955 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
3956
3957
3958display *:syn-display*
3959
3960If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
3961detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
3962by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
3963to be displayed.
3964
3965Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
3966conditions:
3967- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
3968 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
3969 line.
3970- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
3971 make it continue on the next line.
3972- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
3973 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
3974 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
3975- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
3976 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
3977 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
3978 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
3979
3980Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
3981- match with a number
3982- match with a label
3983
3984
3985transparent *:syn-transparent*
3986
3987If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
3988itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
3989is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
3990only to skip over a part of the text.
3991
3992The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
3993unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
3994avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
3995highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
3996 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
3997 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
3998 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
3999 :hi link myString String
4000 :hi link myWord Comment
4001Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4002match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4003argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4004it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4005out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
4006"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This
4007happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4008position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4009
4010When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4011items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4012see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4013through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4014
4015 look from here
4016
4017 | | | | | |
4018 V V V V V V
4019
4020 xxxx yyy more contained items
4021 .................... contained item (transparent)
4022 ============================= first item
4023
4024The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4025transparent group.
4026
4027What you see is:
4028
4029 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4030
4031Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4032
4033
4034oneline *:syn-oneline*
4035
4036The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4037boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4038region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4039the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4040continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4041line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4042
4043When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4044pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4045end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4046means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4047be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4048line break.
4049
4050
4051fold *:syn-fold*
4052
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004053The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004054Example: >
4055 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4056 :syn sync fromstart
4057 :set foldmethod=syntax
4058This will make each {} block form one fold.
4059
4060The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4061ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4062The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
4063{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4064
4065
4066 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004067contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004068
4069The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4070groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4071containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4072regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4073this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4074here.
4075
4076contains=ALL
4077 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4078 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4079
4080contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4081 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4082 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4083 are listed. Example: >
4084 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4085
4086contains=TOP
4087 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4088 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4089 argument.
4090contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4091 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4092
4093contains=CONTAINED
4094 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4095 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4096 argument.
4097contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4098 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4099 listed.
4100
4101
4102The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4103that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4104The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4105 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4106The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4107that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4108command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4109syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4110the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4111group names.
4112
4113The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4114region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4115|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4116region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4117area that is highlighted
4118
4119
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004120containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004121
4122The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4123item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4124containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4125
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004126The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004127
4128This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4129be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4130of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4131the C syntax: >
4132 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4133Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4134level.
4135
4136Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4137appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4138keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4139work.
4140
4141
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004142nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004143
4144The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4145separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4146
4147If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4148tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4149a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4150will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4151current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4152other groups. Example: >
4153 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4154 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4155 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4156
4157This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4158"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4159highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4160
4161 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4162 fff bbb fff bbb
4163
4164Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4165when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4166highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4167would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4168
4169
4170skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4171skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4172skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4173
4174These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4175used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004176 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004177 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4178 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4179
4180When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4181next group that matches the white space.
4182
4183When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4184line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4185line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4186the current item in the same line.
4187
4188When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4189groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4190for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4191space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4192
4193Example: >
4194 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4195 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4196 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4197Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4198match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4199precedence.
4200Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4201"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4202example).
4203
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004204IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4205
4206:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4207 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4208 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4209 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4210 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4211 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4212 given explicitly.
4213
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004214:sy[ntax] conceal
4215 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4216
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004217==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010042188. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004219
4220In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4221characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4222use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4223use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4224 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4225 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4226
4227See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004228always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004229value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4230not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4231independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4232
4233Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4234This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4235
4236 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4237The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4238change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4239match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4240are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4241pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4242
4243The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4244The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4245
4246ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4247me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4248hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4249he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4250rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4251re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4252lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4253
4254The {offset} can be:
4255
4256s start of the matched pattern
4257s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4258s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4259e end of the matched pattern
4260e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4261e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004262{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004263
4264Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4265
4266Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4267meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4268
4269 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4270match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4271region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4272region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4273region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4274
4275Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4276 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4277<
4278 some "string" text
4279 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4280
4281Notes:
4282- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4283 offset(s).
4284- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4285- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4286 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004287- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
4288 This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the
4289 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004290- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4291 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4292 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4293
4294Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4295 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4296<
4297 /* this is a comment */
4298 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4299
4300A more complicated Example: >
4301 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4302<
4303 abcfoostringbarabc
4304 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004305 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004306
4307Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4308
4309Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4310with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4311in the pattern.
4312
4313The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4314be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4315cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4316characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4317used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4318specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4319
4320 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4321 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4322 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4323<
4324 ___zzzz ___wwww
4325 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4326 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4327 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4328
4329The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4330unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4331
4332
4333Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4334
4335The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4336expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4337
4338When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4339allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004340following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4341the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004342
4343The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4344continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4345matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4346halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4347previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4348is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4349 x x a
4350 b x x
4351Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4352after the "\n".
4353
4354
4355External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4356
4357These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4358
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004359 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004360 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4361 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4362 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004363
4364 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4365 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4366 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4367 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4368
4369Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4370sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4371shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4372items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4373referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4374example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4375 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4376
4377As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4378it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004379changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004380first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4381also be used in skip patterns: >
4382 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4383
4384Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4385indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4386to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4387Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4388within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4389sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4390the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4391
4392Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4393cannot be referred to.
4394
4395==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010043969. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004397
4398:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4399 [add={group-name}..]
4400 [remove={group-name}..]
4401
4402This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4403single name.
4404
4405 contains={group-name}..
4406 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4407 add={group-name}..
4408 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4409 remove={group-name}..
4410 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4411
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004412A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4413nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4414this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004415
4416Example: >
4417 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4418 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4419
4420As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4421retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4422to speak: >
4423 :syntax keyword A aaa
4424 :syntax keyword B bbb
4425 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4426 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4427 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4428
4429This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4430 :syntax keyword A aaa
4431 :syntax keyword B bbb
4432 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4433 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4434 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4435 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4436 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004437<
4438 *E848*
4439The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004440
4441==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100444210. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004443
4444It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4445a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4446two different ways:
4447
4448 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4449 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4450 the |:runtime| command: >
4451
4452 " In cpp.vim:
4453 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4454 :unlet b:current_syntax
4455
4456< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4457 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4458 ":syntax include" command:
4459
4460:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4461
4462 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4463 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4464 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4465 that list. >
4466
4467 " In perl.vim:
4468 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4469 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4470<
4471 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4472 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4473 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4474 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4475 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
4476 with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn
4477 include".
4478
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004479 *E847*
4480The maximum number of includes is 999.
4481
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004482==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100448311. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004484
4485Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4486make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4487redrawing starts.
4488
4489:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4490
4491There are four ways to synchronize:
44921. Always parse from the start of the file.
4493 |:syn-sync-first|
44942. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4495 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4496 |:syn-sync-second|
44973. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4498 |:syn-sync-third|
44994. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4500 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4501
4502 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4503For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4504limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4505
4506If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4507that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4508lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4509
4510If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4511for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4512adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4513slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004514 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004515<
4516 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4517When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4518cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4519start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4520the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4521break use this: >
4522 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4523The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4524change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4525value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4526
4527
4528First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4529>
4530 :syntax sync fromstart
4531
4532The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4533accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4534so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004535when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004536case: to the end of the file).
4537
4538Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4539
4540
4541Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4542
4543For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4544Example: >
4545 :syntax sync ccomment
4546
4547When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4548comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4549used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4550An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4551 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4552This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4553used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4554region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4555
4556The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4557lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4558lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4559lines, but it hard to sync on).
4560
4561Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4562that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4563is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4564chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4565is hardly ever noticed.
4566
4567
4568Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4569
4570For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4571Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4572means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4573Example: >
4574 :syntax sync minlines=50
4575
4576"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4577
4578
4579Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4580
4581The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4582sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4583region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4584starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4585the search continues backwards in the file.
4586
4587This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4588matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4589- Keywords cannot be used.
4590- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4591 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4592- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4593 forwards.
4594- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4595 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4596 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
4597 consecutive that contain the continuation pattern.
4598- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4599 group of continued lines).
4600- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4601 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4602 line (or group of continued lines).
4603- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4604 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4605 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4606 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4607
4608There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
46091. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4610 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4611 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4612 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
46132. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4614 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4615 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4616 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4617Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4618
4619Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4620avoid finding unwanted matches.
4621
4622[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4623search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4624highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4625faster.]
4626
4627 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4628 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4629
4630 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4631 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4632 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4633 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4634 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4635
4636 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4637 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4638
4639 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4640 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4641 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4642 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4643 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4644 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4645 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4646 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4647 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4648 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4649
4650 :syntax sync match ..
4651 :syntax sync region ..
4652
4653 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4654 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4655
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004656 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004657 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4658
4659 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4660 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4661 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4662
4663If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4664searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4665few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4666 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4667
4668You can clear all sync settings with: >
4669 :syntax sync clear
4670
4671You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4672 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4673
4674==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100467512. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004676
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004677This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004678
4679 :sy[ntax] [list]
4680
4681To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4682
4683 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4684
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004685To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004686
4687 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4688
4689See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4690
4691Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4692is mostly used, because it looks better.
4693
4694==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100469513. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004696
4697There are three types of highlight groups:
4698- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4699 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4700 linked to a group of the second type.
4701- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4702- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4703 *hitest.vim*
4704You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4705 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4706This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4707in their own color.
4708
4709 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004710:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4711 This is basically the same as >
4712 :echo g:colors_name
4713< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4714 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4715 feature it will output "unknown".
4716
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004717:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004718 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004719 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004720 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4721 "start" and then under "opt".
4722
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004723 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004724 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004725
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004726 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004727 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004728 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004729 runtime colors/evening.vim
4730 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4731
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004732< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4733 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4734 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004735 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004736 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004737 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004738
4739:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4740 attributes set.
4741
4742:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4743 List one highlight group.
4744
4745:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4746 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4747 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4748 default colors to use.
4749
4750:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4751:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4752 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4753 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4754
4755:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4756 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4757 an existing group.
4758 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4759 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4760 argument.
4761
4762Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4763default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4764highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4765values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4766the default value.
4767
4768A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4769a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4770
4771 :hi Comment gui=bold
4772
4773Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4774specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4775result is like this single command has been used: >
4776 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4777<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004778 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004779When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4780also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4781 :verbose hi Comment
4782< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004783 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004784
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004785When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4786mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004787
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004788 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4789There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4790term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
4791cterm a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
4792 termcap entry)
4793gui the GUI
4794
4795For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4796the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4797
47981. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4799
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004800 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4801 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004802 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004803term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4804 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4805 following items (in any order):
4806 bold
4807 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004808 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004809 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004810 reverse
4811 inverse same as reverse
4812 italic
4813 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004814 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004815 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4816
4817 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4818 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004819 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004820 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
4821 is only available in the GUI. The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004822
4823start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4824stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4825 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4826 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4827
4828 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4829 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4830 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4831 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4832 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4833 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4834 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4835
4836 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4837
4838 1. A string with escape sequences.
4839 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4840 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4841 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4842 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4843
4844 2. A list of terminal codes.
4845 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4846 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4847 White space is not allowed. Example:
4848 start=t_C1,t_BL
4849 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4850
4851
48522. highlight arguments for color terminals
4853
4854cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4855 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4856 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4857 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4858 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004859 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4860 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4861 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004862
4863ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4864ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
4865 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4866 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4867 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4868 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4869 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4870 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4871
4872 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4873 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4874 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4875 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4876 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
4877
4878 The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these
4879 have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in X11
4880 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
4881 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
4882 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
4883
4884 *cterm-colors*
4885 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
4886 0 0 Black
4887 1 4 DarkBlue
4888 2 2 DarkGreen
4889 3 6 DarkCyan
4890 4 1 DarkRed
4891 5 5 DarkMagenta
4892 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
4893 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
4894 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
4895 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
4896 10 2* Green, LightGreen
4897 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
4898 12 1* Red, LightRed
4899 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
4900 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
4901 15 7* White
4902
4903 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
4904 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
4905 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
4906 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
4907 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
4908 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
4909 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
4910 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
4911 a number instead of a color name.
4912
4913 The case of the color names is ignored.
4914 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00004915 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004916 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
4917
4918 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
4919 colors!
4920
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01004921 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
4922
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004923 *:hi-normal-cterm*
4924 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
4925 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
4926 Example: >
4927 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
4928< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02004929 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
4930 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
4931 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
4932 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
4933 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004934 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004935 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004936 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004937
4938 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
4939 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
4940 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
4941 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
4942 *E419* *E420*
4943 When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and
4944 "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the
4945 colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console. Example, for
4946 reverse video: >
4947 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
4948< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
4949 command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
4950 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
4951
4952
49533. highlight arguments for the GUI
4954
4955gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
4956 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
4957 See |attr-list| for a description.
4958 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4959 have the same effect.
4960 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
4961
4962font={font-name} *highlight-font*
4963 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
4964 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
4965 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
4966<
4967 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
4968 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
4969 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
4970 used).
4971 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
4972 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
4973 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
4974 changed.
4975 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
4976 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
4977 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02004978 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
4979 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
4980 Example: >
4981 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004982
4983guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
4984guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004985guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
4986 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004987 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
4988 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00004989 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004990 NONE no color (transparent)
4991 bg use normal background color
4992 background use normal background color
4993 fg use normal foreground color
4994 foreground use normal foreground color
4995 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
4996 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
4997 Example: >
4998 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
4999<
5000 *gui-colors*
5001 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5002 Red LightRed DarkRed
5003 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5004 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5005 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5006 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5007 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5008 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5009 Black White
5010 Orange Purple Violet
5011
5012 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5013 |win32-colors|.
5014
5015 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5016 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5017 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005018 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005019 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005020 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
5021 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
5022<
5023 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5024These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5025'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5026of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5027command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005028 *hl-ColorColumn*
5029ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005030 *hl-Conceal*
5031Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5032 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005033 *hl-Cursor*
5034Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005035lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5036 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005037 *hl-CursorIM*
5038CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005039 *hl-CursorColumn*
5040CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5041 set
5042 *hl-CursorLine*
5043CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5044 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005045 *hl-Directory*
5046Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5047 *hl-DiffAdd*
5048DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5049 *hl-DiffChange*
5050DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5051 *hl-DiffDelete*
5052DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5053 *hl-DiffText*
5054DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005055 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005056EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5057 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005058 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5059ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5060 *hl-VertSplit*
5061VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5062 *hl-Folded*
5063Folded line used for closed folds
5064 *hl-FoldColumn*
5065FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5066 *hl-SignColumn*
5067SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5068 *hl-IncSearch*
5069IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5070 ":s///c"
5071 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005072LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005073 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005074 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar410e98a2019-09-09 22:05:49 +02005075CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' is
5076 set to "number" or "both", or 'relativenumber' is set, for
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01005077 the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005078 *hl-MatchParen*
5079MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5080 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5081
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005082 *hl-ModeMsg*
5083ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5084 *hl-MoreMsg*
5085MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5086 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005087NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5088 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5089 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5090 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005091 *hl-Normal*
5092Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005093 *hl-Pmenu*
5094Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5095 *hl-PmenuSel*
5096PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5097 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5098PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5099 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5100PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005101 *hl-Question*
5102Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005103 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5104QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005105 *hl-Search*
5106Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005107 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005108 *hl-SpecialKey*
5109SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5110 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5111 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5112 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005113 *hl-SpellBad*
5114SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5115 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005116 *hl-SpellCap*
5117SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5118 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005119 *hl-SpellLocal*
5120SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5121 used in another region. |spell|
5122 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5123 *hl-SpellRare*
5124SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5125 hardly ever used. |spell|
5126 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005127 *hl-StatusLine*
5128StatusLine status line of current window
5129 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5130StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5131 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5132 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005133 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5134StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5135 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5136StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5137 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005138 *hl-TabLine*
5139TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5140 *hl-TabLineFill*
5141TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5142 *hl-TabLineSel*
5143TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005144 *hl-Terminal*
5145Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005146 *hl-Title*
5147Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5148 *hl-Visual*
5149Visual Visual mode selection
5150 *hl-VisualNOS*
5151VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5152 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5153 *hl-WarningMsg*
5154WarningMsg warning messages
5155 *hl-WildMenu*
5156WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5157
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005158 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005159The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005160statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005161
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005162For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005163scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5164Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5165and guifg.
5166
5167 *hl-Menu*
5168Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5169 Also used for the toolbar.
5170 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5171
5172 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5173 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5174 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5175 set.
5176
5177 *hl-Scrollbar*
5178Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5179 scrollbars.
5180 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5181
5182 *hl-Tooltip*
5183Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5184 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5185
5186 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5187 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5188 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5189 set.
5190
5191==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100519214. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005193
5194When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5195can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5196group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5197
5198To set a link:
5199
5200 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5201
5202To remove a link:
5203
5204 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5205
5206Notes: *E414*
5207- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5208 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5209- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5210 removed.
5211- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5212 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5213 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5214 links for groups that already have settings.
5215
5216 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5217The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5218group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5219will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5220
5221Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5222specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5223 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5224If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5225 :highlight link cComment Question
5226Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5227overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5228
5229==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100523015. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005231
5232If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5233command: >
5234 :syntax clear
5235
5236This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5237or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5238in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5239load the syntax file.
5240The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5241loaded after this command.
5242
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005243To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5244 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5245This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5246
5247To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5248 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5249This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5250
5251 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005252If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5253the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5254 :syntax off
5255
5256What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5257 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5258See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5259$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5260
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005261 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5262If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5263defaults back: >
5264
5265 :syntax reset
5266
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005267It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5268affects the highlighting.
5269
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005270This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5271
5272Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5273back to their Vim default.
5274Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5275scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5276
5277What this actually does is: >
5278
5279 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5280 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5281
5282Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5283
5284 *syncolor*
5285If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5286script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5287'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5288the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5289reset" command.
5290
5291For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5292
5293 if &background == "light"
5294 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5295 else
5296 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5297 endif
5298
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005299 *E679*
5300Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5301'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5302endless loop.
5303
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005304Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5305your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5306depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5307
5308 *syntax_cmd*
5309The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5310syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5311 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5312 links are kept
5313 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5314 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5315 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5316 the colors.
5317 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5318 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5319 them.
5320
5321==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100532216. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005323
5324If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5325mappings.
5326
5327 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5328 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5329>
5330 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5331 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5332
5333WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5334memory Vim will consume.
5335
5336Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5337must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5338
5339Put these lines in your Makefile:
5340
5341# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5342types: types.vim
5343types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005344 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005345 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5346 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5347
5348And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5349
5350 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5351 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5352 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5353 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5354 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5355
5356==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100535717. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005358
5359Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5360possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5361private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5362with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5363highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5364italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5365
5366To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5367windows on the buffer: >
5368 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005369< *w:current_syntax*
5370This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5371"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5372restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5373"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5374"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005375Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005376
5377Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005378on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005379syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005380same buffer.
5381
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005382A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5383is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5384When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005385
5386==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100538718. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005388
5389Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5390default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5391 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5392 : if has("terminfo")
5393 : set t_Co=8
5394 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5395 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5396 : else
5397 : set t_Co=8
5398 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5399 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5400 : endif
5401 :endif
5402< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5403
5404You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5405e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5406
5407Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5408be wrong.
5409 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5410The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5411But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5412 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5413 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5414<
5415 *colortest.vim*
5416To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005417To use it, execute this command: >
5418 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005419
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005420Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005421output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5422at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5423colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5424
5425 *xfree-xterm*
5426To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005427included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005428at: >
5429 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5430Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5431termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5432supports. >
5433 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5434If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5435(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5436
5437This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5438 :if has("terminfo")
5439 : set t_Co=16
5440 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5441 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5442 :else
5443 : set t_Co=16
5444 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5445 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5446 :endif
5447< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5448
5449Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5450translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5451Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5452
5453For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5454
5455 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5456 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5457
5458Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5459and try if that works.
5460
5461You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5462 XTerm*color0: #000000
5463 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5464 XTerm*color2: #008000
5465 XTerm*color3: #808000
5466 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5467 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5468 XTerm*color6: #008080
5469 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5470 XTerm*color8: #808080
5471 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5472 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5473 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5474 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5475 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5476 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5477 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5478 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5479
5480[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5481cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005482newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005483
5484To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5485Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5486 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5487<
5488 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5489To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5490Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5491these resources:
5492 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5493 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5494 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5495 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5496
5497 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005498These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005499foreground colors: >
5500 :if has("terminfo")
5501 : set t_Co=8
5502 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5503 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5504 :else
5505 : set t_Co=8
5506 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5507 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5508 :endif
5509< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5510
5511 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5512These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5513emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5514bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5515 :set t_Co=16
5516 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5517 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5518<
5519 *TTpro-telnet*
5520These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5521open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5522 set t_Co=16
5523 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5524 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5525Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5526that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5527(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5528
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005529
5530==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100553119. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005532
5533This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5534
5535If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5536faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5537as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5538
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005539Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5540You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5541
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005542To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5543sequence: >
5544 :syntime on
5545 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5546 :syntime report
5547
5548This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5549it took to match them against the text.
5550
5551:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5552 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5553 matching.
5554
5555:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5556
5557:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5558
5559:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5560 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5561 the output.
5562
5563 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5564 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5565 matching this pattern.
5566 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5567 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5568 matched
5569 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5570 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5571 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5572 this is not unique.
5573 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5574
5575Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5576include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5577pattern does NOT match.
5578
5579When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5580all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5581literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5582
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005583"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005584 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005585"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005586
5587
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005588 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: